Chrysler 300SRT Owner`s manual

Chrysler 300SRT Owner`s manual
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
300
SRT 8
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment
that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techniLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- contains the information you desire.
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
tions and recommendations in this manual will help contains a complete listing of all subjects.
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- this Owner’s Manual:
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
VIN Location
number also appears on the Automobile Information The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartvehicle registration, and the title.
ment.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .24
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . .
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . .
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.43
.44
.44
.48
.53
.53
.54
.55
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 䡵 SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .64
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition push to operate the ignition switch.
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
SENTRY KEY®
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Replacement Keys
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authovehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
is one that has never been programmed.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch (and
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button) for unauthorCustomer Key Programming
ized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid
performed at an authorized dealer.
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
General Information
Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15 starting and provide the following audible and visible
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
subject to the following conditions:
instrument cluster will flash.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Rearming Of The System
• This device must accept any interference that may be
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
received, including interference that may cause undedisarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
sired operation.
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
(RKE) transmitter.
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, To Disarm The System
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, the following methods:
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
key is physically removed from the ignition.
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
vehicle:
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ⬙ in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
information.
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
Door Handle with a valid FOB available in the same
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ , described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ,
Vehicle Security Alarm.
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
key to the ON position.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
NOTE:
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
(extreme bottom position).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is system.
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Flash Lights With Lock
To Lock The Doors
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlatch The Trunk
NOTE:
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
and horn will remain on.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” under “Things To Know Before
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Using The Panic Alarm
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
by the system.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least
one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the Programming Additional Transmitters
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will performed at an authorized dealer.
turn on.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph battery.
(24 km/h) or greater.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
Emergency Key Removal
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
the seal during removal.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
halves together.
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
General Information
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
following conditions:
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve• This device must accept any interference received,
niently from outside the vehicle while still
including interference that may cause undesired opmaintaining security. The system has a range of
eration.
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic •
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
•
reduce this range.
•
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
RKE PANIC button not pressed
System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle theft alarm not active
Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights will
flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
• For security, power window and power sunroof opto the ON/RUN position.
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and
release the START/STOP button.
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
the EVIC until you push the START button.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull
the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
Door Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is
placed in NEUTRAL.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reraise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
sponse time.
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the theft
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
alarm.
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . This feature allows you To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to door is unlocked.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter
• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid • Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
door panel switch and then close the doors
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitof CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
located on the deck lid.
deck lid.
To Enter The Trunk
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
2
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
WINDOWS
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Reset Auto-Up
the first detent and release it when you want the window Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
to stop.
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
NOTE:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoadditional two seconds after the window is closed.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
switch again to close the window.
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
after the window is fully open.
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the Window Lockout Switch
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
WARNING!
passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if equipped).
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls and
the rear sunscreen, press and release the window lockout
button again (setting it in the UP position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Window Lockout Switch
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Trunk Release
Button
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds or by
using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release Some of the most important safety features in your
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event vehicle are the restraint systems:
of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle
all passengers
attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
energy during an impact event
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
WARNING!
possible.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Adseat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether vanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold severe injury or death to infants in that position.
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
CHildren (LATCH).
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltNOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
severity and type of collision.
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SAB), and if deployment occurs, the SABIC
and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between you and the door.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! (Continued)
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
adjust the seat.
go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will prefer a
lower position, and if you are taller than average you will
prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage try
to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child ReLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
First Row
Second
Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. • N/A — Not Applicable
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Passenger
ALR
ALR
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a
belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortthe entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/
locking mode.
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Refurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authoReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire deactivating BeltAlert®.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuBeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
panel below the steering column.
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
2 — Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
NOTE:
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
authorized dealer immediately.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Label Location
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the side air bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the location of the SABIC. The area where the
SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the approSide air bags also work with seat belts to improve
priate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat
occupant protection.
recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
several factors, including the severity and type of impact. type of collision.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection
by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions
depending on several factors, including the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected
to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in
the side of the air bag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milinflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
liseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
especially applies to children.
it is inflated.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power, until the ignition key is revehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
the Keyless Go Start/Stop button.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
events.
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if If A Deployment Occurs
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deyou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. bags will not be in place to protect you.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
WARNING!
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retracparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer improcess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the air bag system immediately.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
cycled to the ON/RUN.
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
eight-second interval.
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
is designed to record such data as:
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
crash investigation.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
were buckled/fastened;
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children. Every state in the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by United States, and every Canadian province, requires
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafetyThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
index-53.htm
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
WARNING!
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardthe highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
facing infant seat.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing
•
Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
seat.
often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their
Infants And Child Restraints
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
N/A
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are under
a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoseat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
position.
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
WARNING!
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
typical installation instructions.
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
Center Seat LATCH
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
in any direction.
restraint to get a better fit.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un- Restraints in this Vehicle
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
in any direction.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
“click.”
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that
seating position (see the charts above), move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
Adjustable Headrest Downward Position
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
be detrimental and should be avoided.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
The engine oil is a high performance synthetic lubricant,
the transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid,
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operaSRT ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
tions will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
vehicle.
Transporting Pets
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph
(80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete or retractor condition, replace the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .112
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features
Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED . .114
Approach Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .110
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Uconnect® Phone (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .191
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .199
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ SmartBeam — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . .
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
. . . . . .207
. . . . . .209
. . . . . .210
. . . . . .210
. . . . . .211
. . . . . .211
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .214
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .218
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .225
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .226
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .232
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .254
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .236
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .237
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .254
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .239 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .244
Touch—Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped. . . .246
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 PARKSENSE® PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . .248
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. .
▫ Front Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .253
. .257
. .259
. .259
. .260
. .261
. .261
. .262
. .263
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .267
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .271
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
.274
.276
.276
.276
.276
.277
.277
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .277
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .290
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with
60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Glovebox Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Cargo Net (for versions/markets where
provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Power Sunshade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .294
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
lane next to your vehicle.
This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dim-
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
ming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger’s side
when equipped with turn signal and approach lighting.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door
handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area
in front of the doors.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about NOTE:
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
• The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
Uconnect® System.
• Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver’s tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
door trim panel.
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Mirror Control
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
to the normal driving position.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
3
Slide-On-Rod Feature
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
BSM Warning Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on
both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone starts at
the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately
20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in
these areas.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly
approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
RCP Detection Zones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approModes Of Operation
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
formation.
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert, the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
system, the radio volume is reduced.
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailable• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
the appropriate visual alert only.
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is Uconnect® Phone (8.4/8.4N)
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4N
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, inRCP state always requests the chime.
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone alBlind Spot Alert Off
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual phone.
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled
and used.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
Screen Activated Features
Voice Activated Features:
• Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen.
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo- • Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks disbile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).
played on the touch-screen.
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming • Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
SMS messages.
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John •
Smith Mobile”).
•
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
•
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”).
•
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
•
Recent Calls”).
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
Sending a text message via the touch-screen.
Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
touch-screen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
For Uconnect® customer support, visit the following
website:
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
1–877–855–8400.
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
• Canadian Residents - visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call, Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
1-800-465–2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
microphone for private conversation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or Uconnect® Voice Command Button
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
The Uconnect® Voice Command
Button is
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
only used for “barge in” and when you are
the system at a time. The system is available in English,
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
Spanish, or French languages.
make another call.
Uconnect® Phone Button
button is also used to access the Voice ComThe
Button is used to get
The Uconnect® Phone
into the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc., When you press the button you will
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
mands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if
your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect® Voice
Command section for direction on how to use the
button.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following comPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile”.
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth- • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
ods for how Voice Command works:
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mobile”.
say each part of the command when you are asked for
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
it. For example, you can use the compound command
guide you to complete the task.
form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or you
can break the compound command form into two
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
guided through the available options.
“John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
prompt.
meters away from you.
Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
question to which the user can respond without pressing
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
button.
the Voice Command
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
Voice Command Tree
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
Help Command
would like to”.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly the beep.
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press
button and say a command or say “help”. All
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who the
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Natural Speech
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cancel Command
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and 2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
you will be returned to the main menu.
system, a pop-up will appear.
or
buttons when the
You can also press the
system is listening for a command and be returned to the
main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from
the Uconnect® Phone main screen,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen,
• See Step 4 to complete the process.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
while the system is connecting.
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
screen,
• Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
screen,
• Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
while the system is connecting,
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
• When the pairing process has successfully completed, paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not priority.
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up • Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
• “Show Paired Phones” or
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
• Touch the “Media” soft-key to begin,
• When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
• Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
Audio Devices screen,
priority.
• Change the Source to Bluetooth®,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
• “Show Paired Phones” or
system, a pop-up will appear.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- • “Connect My Phone”
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen,
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name,
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high- • The options pop-up will be displayed,
est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
• Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio
Device follow these steps:
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired • Touch the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key,
Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the
currently connected device,
Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key,
• Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect®
website, www.UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name,
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
• Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
example, after you start the vehicle.
chosen device move to the top of the list,
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
Transfer From Mobile Phone – If Equipped
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availnames) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availphonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book
able for use.
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key,
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites”.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone
main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phone- NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
book from the Phone main screen, then select the remove an existing favorite.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From the
phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key and
then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch the +
on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears,
touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be asked which
contact and number to choose from your mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite will be shown.
To Remove A Favorite
• To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the Phone
main screen.
• Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
• Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
Favs”.
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only
be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannot
be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these
steps.
• Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
• Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites.
• Touch the + Options soft-key.
• Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
• The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
to default.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Phone Call Features
• Mobile Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides threeway calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
• Recent Call Log
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
• SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
• Press the
button to begin,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call • The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number 248-555-1212.
with Uconnect® Phone.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Redial
• Press the
• Dial by touching in the number
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
button to begin,
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
• The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
• Favorites
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Controls
Touch-Tone Number Entry
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call •
features:
•
• Answer
•
• End
•
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call”.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or
the
you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail
password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Recent Calls
• Missed Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the • All Calls
following call types:
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
will be displayed.
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will
be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed”.
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button to accept the call. To ignore the Progress
call. Press the
call, touch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
can also touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the caller
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
ID box.
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
Currently In Progress
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
If a call is currently in progress and you have another the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from
call waiting that you normally hear when using your the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to
button, answer soft- “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine two
mobile phone. Press the phone
key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
answer the incoming call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
Call Termination
During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
butPhone main screen.
ton or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
Toggling Between Calls
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), far end, a call on hold may not become active automatitouch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen. cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Redial
button to toggle between the
You can also press the
• Press the “Redial” soft-key,
active and held phone call.
and after the “Listening” prompt and
• or press the
Join Calls
the following beep, say “Redial”,
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main • The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
follows:
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
• Press the
button to begin.
Call Continuation
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
say “Call Emergency” or “Dial Emergency” and the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
Uconnect® Phone will instruct the paired mobile
“transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
phone to call the emergency number. This feature is
supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
Uconnect® Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
NOTE:
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is • The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touch-screen.
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
number for your area.
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your NOTE:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• The roadside assistance call may also be initiated by
for the mobile phone directly.
touch.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect®
Phone.
Roadside Assistance
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069
for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24–Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
If you need roadside assistance:
Voice Mail Calling
• Press the
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
button to begin.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance”.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonesystem or an automated service, such as a paging service
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
or automated customer service line. Some services rePassword”, then if you press the
button and say
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect® Phone will
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
then send the corresponding phone number associated
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
NOTE:
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
button and say the word • The first number encountered for that contact will be
touch-screen or press the
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
ignored.
button and say, “Send 3 7 4
4 6 #), you can press the
6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
Working With Automated Systems
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time Voice Response Length
out settings that are too short and may not allow the It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
use of this feature.
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by • Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
touch the “Settings” soft-key,
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
• Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice
a numbered sequence.
Response Length,
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
• Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
show your selection.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are two
numbers with the name John. Say the full name” you Phone And Network Status Indicators
button and say, “John Smith” to Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of of your phone and network status when you are attemptthe voice prompt.
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort
and convenience of you and your passengers. Only
use such features when it is safe to do so. Failure to
follow this Warning may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice a command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the Mute
button on the Phone main screen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
main screen.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period.
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
• Even though the system is designed for many languages
• Audio quality is maximized under:
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• When navigating through an automated system such
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking
• low road noise,
the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• smooth road surface,
• It is recommended that you do not store names in your
• fully closed windows,
favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
• dry weather conditions, and
• Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition
• operation from the driver’s seat.
rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and vehicle is not in moving.
not the Uconnect® Phone.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® in order
to use this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines
your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be greyed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Read Messages:
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will • Send a Reply
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
• Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,
• Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
• Press the
button,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile”,
• After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List”. There are 18 preset messages.
• If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message sent,
• Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
button and sayinterrupt the system by pressing the
ing the message you want to send.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After the system confirms that you want to send your List of Preset Messages:
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
11. See you in <number> minutes.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
12. Stuck in traffic.
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
pound (#)
add location
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
previous
record again
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a
message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
only the first number encountered in a contact name
which phone number you want to send a message to for
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
John Smith.
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voice2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
mail password” only the Home number will be sent
“Other”.
NOTE:
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing 8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
commands will return a response that the contact does
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number
not exist in the phonebook.
supported by your Mobile phone.
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
been pre-loaded in the phonebooks. Commands such as
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on the
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted while
the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
the VR session is active.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
which phone number you want to send a message to
number supported by your Mobile phone.
for John Smith.
6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
on the screen.
“Other”.
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
commands will return a response that the contact does
not exist in the phonebook.
NOTE:
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and Sirifollowing conditions:
usXM Travel Link.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
the party responsible for compliance could void the system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
or a raised voice level.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.,
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command what can be said based on the context you are in. After
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session will end.
to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command
button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice
“Help”.
button and say “Help”. You will hear
Command
These commands are universal and can be used from any available commands for the screen displayed.
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
question to which the user can respond without pressing
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
button.
the Uconnect® Voice Command
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I Uconnect® Voice Commands
would like to”.
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase two types of commands. Universal commands are availor sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly able at all times. Local commands are available if the
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- supported radio mode is active.
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice Comprovides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who mand
button.
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Natural Speech
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Changing the Volume
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in
Radio/Player Modes
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
button.
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when a
call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
button.
Command
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume Disc
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”.
system.
This command can be given in any mode or screen:
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM”.
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE:
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE:
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”.
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams”.
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”,
“Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”.
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE:
1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find
Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find
Recently Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”.
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”,
“Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Entertainment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Community”,
“Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Airport”,
“Police Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto Dealers”.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
SEATS
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
vehicle.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down, Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
forward or rearward.
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Reclining The Seatback
WARNING! (Continued)
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
Front Heated Seat Operations —
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect® display.
Controls Soft-Key
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level heating. Press the softkey a second time to select LO-level heating.
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
within two to five minutes.
Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
number of indicators illuminated changes from two to
one, indicating the change. Operation on the LO-level
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats
setting also turns OFF automatically after approximately
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these
30 minutes.
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
within two to five minutes.
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
LO and none for OFF.
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating. ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
Press the switch a second time to select LO- small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine
level heating. Press the switch a third time to perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and
front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seats
If the HI-level heating is selected, the system will auto- The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect®
matically switch to LO-level heating after approximately System.
30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a
third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
Uconnect® display.
Front Ventilated Seat Operation —
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav:
Controls Soft-Key
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during
a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
Push Button
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
downward on the head restraint.
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two positions, up or down.
When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint
should be in the raised position. When there are no
Push Button
occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
NOTE:
The
outboard
head restraints are not adjustable.
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Before Starting Your Vehicle” for tether routing.
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Folded Rear Seatback
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loop
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE:
• Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
• Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the
memory function. Use either the memory recall switch
or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory
feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display which memory position has been set.
Memory Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE:
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in 1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
Enter-N-Go).
memory profile.
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature 2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
can be enabled through the Uconnect® System, refer to
the system to complete the memory recall before
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrucontinuing to Step 3.
ment Panel” for further information.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and pressing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE
transmitter in Step 4.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number (2) on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
Memory Position Recall
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side
mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall
can be selected.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if equipped).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number (1) on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the
driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in
(22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about
or Easy Entry.
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the
Entry and Easy Exit position.
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
RUN position.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
or disabled using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Hood Safety Latch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Automatic Headlights Only)
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
position.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruNOTE: The engine must be running before the head- ment Panel” for further information.
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
SmartBeam — If Equipped
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will NOTE:
turn off in the normal manner.
• SmartBeam can be turned on or off using the Uconnect®
NOTE:
System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
feature.
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced, the Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
SmartBeam mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper Headlights — If Equipped
performance. See your local authorized dealer.
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
To Activate
the direction the vehicle is steering.
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
NOTE:
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward • Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on,
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
sequence of rotations.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when
at or above 15 mph (30 km/h).
the vehicle is moving forward.
To Deactivate
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Setin car) to manually deactivate the system (normal tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
operation of low beams).
further information.
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when- Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlights are off, the transmission is moved out of switch.
“Park” position, and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off
the headlight switch.
Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
The rear fog light switch is built into the headlight multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
switch. To activate the rear fog lights, turn the column.
headlamp switch to the park lamp or headlamp
position. Press the headlight switch once for front fog lights,
press the switch a second time for front and rear fog lights.
Pressing the switch a third time will deactivate the rear fog
lights, and a fourth time will deactivate the front fog lights.
Turning the headlight switch off will also deactivate the fog
lights.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
Multifunction Lever
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either released.
turn signal on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over- side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a second
head console.
time. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is pressed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilsecond time.
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch.
3
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light Control
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Dome Light Position
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position. The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the parking lights or headlights are on.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
the intermittent interval previously selected.
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
lever.
and then turn off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
WARNING!
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
Windshield Washers
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as windshield with the defroster before and during
washer spray is desired.
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- following conditions:
formation.
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
NOTE:
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
when ice or dried salt water is present on the
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
windshield.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the transmission shift lever is in the NEUmay reduce rain sensor performance.
TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or
downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column switch is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down
as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from
you as desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
Controls Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
Adjustable Pedals Switch
from the driver to provide improved position with the
Press
the
switch
forward to move the pedals forward
steering wheel.
(toward the front of the vehicle).
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cushion side shield.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward • For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
(toward the driver).
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “UnderREVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sysstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on
information.
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
CAUTION!
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limNOTE:
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full adjustable pedal’s path.
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.0 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
speed memory.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
To Resume Speed
will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
(1.0 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Accelerate For Passing
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inPress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
To Deactivate
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
vehicle set speed.
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
moderate hills is normal.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
Control.
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (e.g.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
DISTANCE SETTING
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
3
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
3
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
Driver Override
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (25 km/h)
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- To Turn Off
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, memory if:
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
To Resume Speed
To Vary The Speed Setting
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
last set speed.
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
18 mph (30 km/h).
display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
EVIC display.
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph Setting The Following Distance In ACC
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
NOTE:
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
Distance Set 3 (long)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
3
Distance Set 2 (medium)
Distance Set 1 (short)
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short).
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
speed.
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
the sensor.
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph from the vehicle ahead.
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages itself.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
3
Brake Alert 3
Brake Alert 2
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC”
or “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC
or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line.
Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to
display the following information:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Brake Alert 1
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
• When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The ACC SET
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument • When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The • The set speed will continue to display in place of the
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
• Set Speed Change
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of • If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
authorized dealer for service.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
section.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
vehicle behind the lower grille.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- simply reactivating it.
tant to note the following maintenance items:
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recomsensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
the sensor lens.
operation.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable Warning
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to Turns And Bends
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
3
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
While pressing the mode button, a chime alerts the driver
to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to
normal Cruise Control. “Cruise Ready” will be displayed
if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position.
“Cruise Off” will be displayed if the system was in the
ACC OFF position. To switch back to Adaptive Cruise
Control mode, press the MODE button a second time.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Resume
There are two ways to change the set speed:
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
speed.
desired speed and press the SET - button.
To Turn Off
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respec- The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
tively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph memory if:
(8 km/h) increments.
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
To Cancel
• You turn off the ignition.
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
• You switch off ESC.
erasing the memory if:
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
• You press the CANCEL button.
Normal Cruise Control).
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react and avoid the potential collision.
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will
be displayed in the Uconnect® display.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
10 mph (16 km/h).
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows • FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as overthe system to warn you of a possible collision with the
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncomsetting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
rate of speed.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system • If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
display on the EVIC screen.
in front of you.
FCW Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
• In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the FCW Unavailable, Service Required”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Uconnect® display.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE® PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 30 cm up to 120 cm from
the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, deParkSense® Sensors
pending on the location, type and orientation of the
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ obstacle.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
ParkSense® Warning Display
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 30 cm up to 200 cm from The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, de- Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
pending on the location, type and orientation of the System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
obstacle.
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Park Assist Display
ParkSense® Display
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
Park Assist System ON
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
3
Park Assist System OFF
Slow Tone
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
Greater than
59 in (150 cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
Arc
None
WARNING ALERTS
59-39 in
39-25 in
(150-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single
Slow
1/2 second tone
(for rear only)
(for rear only)
3 Solid
3 Slow Flashing
(Continuous)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow Flashing
1 Slow Flashing
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the ParkSense® soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition,
the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
When the ParkSense® Park Assist system is malfunctioning, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will NOTE:
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
ASSIST” or the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” messystem operating properly.
sage. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE or • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 30 cm from the rear
DRIVE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
instrument cluster will display “PARK ASSIST OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE and
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
when the vehicle is in DRIVE at or below 18 km/h.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
the instrument cluster.
sounding a tone.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. When backing up, it
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense®.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense® Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using the ParkSense® Park Assist system, it
is strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns on the single
flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
view image shall not be displayed for more than 5 seconds and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Touch—Screen Radio
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “More” soft-key.
3. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
Overhead Console
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels.The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- indicator flashes.
rity Alarm is active.
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
button you want to program and the hand-held trans6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
mitter button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the inditwo seconds each time). If the garage door opener/
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
device activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
mitter button.
follow these steps:
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Renot release the button.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programfrom slow to rapid.
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
steps.
and observe the indicator light.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
before 1995.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
erase the channels.
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
not release the button.
door or gate motor.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiIf you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage follow these steps:
door may open and close while you are programming. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programnot release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Using HomeLink®
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close
operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Venting Sunroof — Express
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurPress and release the Vent button within one half second rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
the glass panel.
information.
Ignition OFF Operation
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front between the sun visors on the overhead console.
door will cancel this feature.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
Sunroof Maintenance
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
the sun visors on the overhead console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
WARNING! (Continued)
CommandView® Sunroof and Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
(Continued)
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Opening Power Shade — Express
Closing Power Shade — Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. The shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward .
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, it will automatically close
during the ⬙Sun Shade Express Close⬙ movement.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Sunroof Maintenance
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be the glass panel.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Ignition Off Operation
Wind Buffeting
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
NOTE:
Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi- NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® knob
mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned and element must be used.
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
CAUTION!
• The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are three 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicle’s not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
3
Center Console Power Outlet
There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of
the center console for rear passengers. This power outlet
has power available only when the ignition is placed in
the ACC or RUN position.
Rear Center Console Power Outlet
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel And
Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
(Continued)
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Front Cupholders
Retractable Cover
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool.
Heated and Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
WARNING!
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the Heat position.
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient
access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a
resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
3
Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment
Console Features
Glovebox Storage Compartment
There is a cubby bin located forward of the shift lever.
The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated
door. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door
a second time to close it.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Two separate storage compartments are also located integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
underneath the center console armrest.
small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
Upper Storage Tray
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
3
Front Door Trim Storage
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
compartment.
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Armrest Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The
trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from
mud, snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs
(22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Cargo Net (for versions/markets where provided)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
The rear cargo area is equipped with a cargo net.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
Rear Cargo Net
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Power Sunshade — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade
that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine
through the rear windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect®
System.
Press the “Controls” soft-key and then press the “Sunshade” soft-key to raise the power sunscreen. Press the
“Sunshade” soft-key a second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is
placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically
fully lower. When the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the
fully raised position after approximately five seconds.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
out along with the rear passenger window controls from
the driver switch window lockout switch.
3
Power Sunshade Soft-Key
Controls Soft-Key
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers
in the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located
on the back of the center console between the heated seat
switches. Press the switch once to raise the sunshade.
Press the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
Power Sunshade Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .301
▫ Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ EVIC White Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .328
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .350
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
▫ SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . .
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .349
. .352
. .352
. .353
. .353
. .359
. .360
. .361
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Hazard Switch
— Uconnect® System
— Climate Control Hard Controls
— Glove Compartment
— ESC Off Switch
8 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls
9 — SD Memory Card Slot
10 — Power Outlet
11 — CD/DVD Slot
12 — Storage Compartment
13 — Engine Start/Stop Button
14 — Trunk Release Button
15
16
17
18
19
— Dimmer Controls
— Hood Release
— Headlight Switch
— Analog Clock
— Paddle Shifters
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
1. Tachometer
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear for a defective outside light bulb.
range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
4. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
accelerator.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
2. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
This indicator will illuminate when the park
5. High Beam Indicator
lights or headlights are turned on.
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever for3. Turn SignalIndicators
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
when the turn signal lever is operated.
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
Center (EVIC) Display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) feaOdometer Display
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the EVIC displauy. It displays the gear position of the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your automatic transmission.
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair NOTE:
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must The highest available transmission gear is displayed in
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informabefore the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to tion Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
must be reset at zero.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
7. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
should be checked monthly when cold and in- maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard low tire pressure telltale.
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter- operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi- approximately one minute and then remain continuously
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsetires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the syscheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
ability.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
monitors engine and automatic transmission conto continue to function properly.
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
CAUTION!
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
warning have been established for the tire size illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
placement equipment that is not of the same size, drive normally and will not require towing.
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
9. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
10. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
11. Fuel Gauge
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
12. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized 14. Sport Suspension
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
The light will illuminate when Sport or Track
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
mode is selected. When Sport mode is selected,
further information.
the EVIC will display “Sport Mode Active
13. Sport Shifting
(Suspension)”. This mode provides performance based tuning with improved handling through an
This light will illuminate when Track mode is
electronic controlled damping system. This system reselected. When Track Mode is selected, the
duces body roll and pitch in many driving situations
EVIC will display “Track Mode Activated (Susincluding cornering, acceleration and braking. When
pension and Transmission)”. In addition to
Track Mode is Selected, the EVIC will display “Track
SPORT suspension, Track mode also affects transmission
Mode Activated (Suspension and Transmission)”. In adshifting in either Auto or Manual mode. Refer to
dition to SPORT suspension, Track mode also affects
“AutoStick” in “Starting And Operating” for further
transmission shifting. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting
information. The transmission has a sportier, more agAnd Operating” for further information.
gressive shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission
will hold gear at redline during manual shifting (console
shifter or paddle switches).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it 17. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system Light — If Equipped
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conthe conventional brake system will continue to operate
trol (ESC) is off.
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock 18. Brake Warning Light
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
This light monitors various brake functions,
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
including brake fluid level and parking brake
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
diagnosed and corrected.
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
when the ignition switch is turned to the
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds 21. Temperature Gauge
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperawhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
caused the ESC activation.
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaWhen the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
CAUTION!
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “260” pull
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Startover and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “260”
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful The system allows the driver to select information by
information by pressing the switches mounted on the pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
wheel:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Cruise Control Info
• Digital Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info Messages
• Stored Warning Messages
• Turn Menu OFF
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
UP Button
BACK Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll upPress the BACK button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or sub-menu item.
ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info
and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages) and
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
sub-menus.
Displays
DOWN Button
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
1. The top line where compass direction and outside
downward through the main menus and Vetemperature are displayed.
hicle Info and Trip Info sub-menus.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
SELECT Button
messages are displayed.
Press and release the SELECT button to access 3. The reconfigurable telltales section.
the information screens or sub-menu screens of
a main menu item. Press and hold the SELECT The main display area will normally display the main
button for two seconds to reset displayed/ menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
selected features that can be reset.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- • Unstored Messages Until RUN
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
into several categories:
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of ⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
message takes control of the main display area for Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long
as the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As
long as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed
in the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of
this message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out⬙ and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in
Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
EVIC White Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Shift Lever Status
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The selected AutoStick® gear is displayed as ⬙1⬙, ⬙2⬙, ⬙3⬙,
⬙4⬙, or ⬙5⬙ for five-speed automatic transmissions, ⬙1⬙, ⬙2⬙, • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
⬙3⬙, ⬙4⬙, ⬙5⬙, “6”, “7”, or “8” for eight-speed automatic
This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is
transmission and indicate the AutoStick® feature has
ON. For further information, refer to “Adapbeen engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
further information on AutoStick®, refer to “Starting
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
And Operating”.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is
This telltale will illuminate when the electronic
SET. For further information, refer to “Adapspeed control is ON. For further information,
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “UnderThe Features Of Your Vehicle.”
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Amber Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
This telltale informs the driver that the For- • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
ward Collision Warning feature is Off. The
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
telltale is On when the front radar sensor is
operating and needs service. For further informablocked and requires cleaning, the ACC/FCW
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
sensors require service, or the ACC/FCW system is
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
unavailable because of a system error. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
telltales include:
• Charging System Telltale
• Door Ajar
EVIC Red Telltales
This telltale shows the status of the electrical
This telltale turns on when one or more doors
charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes
are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are
on
while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonajar.
essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at
• Trunk Ajar
idle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means
This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
lid is ajar.
an authorized dealer.
• Oil Pressure Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale
• Engine Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale informs you of a problem with the
This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge apElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the
telltale comes on while driving, have the sys- proaches H, or 260°F, this telltale will illuminate and a
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on while
pass H, or 260°F, a continuous chime will occur until the
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
engine is allowed to cool.
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The telltale should turn off. If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, your
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vevehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authohicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the telltale
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
is required. You may experience reduced performance, an
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
telltale turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The ⬙Oil Change Due⬙ message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded at the start of each ignition that an oil
change is due. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Fuel
Economy⬙ is highlighted. Press the SELECT button and
the next screen will display the following:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the • Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Average Fuel Economy / ECO Fuel Saver Mode —
If Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When Average Fuel Economy is selected, The word
⬙RESET>⬙ (with right arrow) appears next to it. Pressing
the right arrow button will reset Average Fuel Economy
which displays ⬙0⬙ immediately after reset. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
4
Fuel Economy Display (5.7L Version Shown)
There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside
Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display. This icon
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
Distance To Empty (DTE)
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display. Press
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the BACK button to return to the main menu.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel The Miles Per Gallon (MPG) feature displays instantatank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE, this
button.
function cannot be reset. Press the BACK button to return
to the main menu.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. Press the
BACK button to return to the main menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Cruise Control
change. If Cruise is active and a warning or other feature
is in the EVIC main display, the Cruise status will be
displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙ACC⬙ (if
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control) or ⬙Cruise⬙ is
highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC or Cruise is Press and release the BACK button to return to the main
displayed in the menu line also. Press and release the menu.
SELECT (right arrow) button to display the following
Vehicle Speed
information:
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Vehicle
• If equipped with ACC, one of several messages will be Speed⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT button
displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the
to view a digital display of the current speed in mph
feature as the driver changes feature status or following or km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will
conditions change. If ACC is active and a warning or
toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h. Press the
other feature is in the EVIC main display, the ACC status BACK button to return to the main menu.
will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed
• For vehicles with Cruise, one of several messages will be
menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC.
displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the
feature as the driver changes feature status or conditions
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Trip B
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Trip Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Info⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the reset.
SELECT button to display the following three trip feaElapsed Time
tures in the next screen:
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
• Trip A
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON or START position.
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
Resetting A Trip Info Function
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
Trip Computer functions or press the BACK button to function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN
buttons. Push the SELECT button until the feature disreturn to the main menu.
plays zero.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙
is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the SELECT
button and one of the following will be displayed:
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, ⬙Tire Pressure
LOW⬙ is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, ⬙Service
Tire Pressure System⬙ is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the BACK button to return to the
main menu.
SRT
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the performance pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Performance Features include the following:
The following describes each feature and its operation:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
Timers
• Braking Distance
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• 1/8 Mile
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will appear
when conditions are met for the event to begin.
To access, press and release either the UP or DOWN
arrow button until “SRT” appears in the EVIC, then press • The screen will revert back to “Please come to a
complete stop, Not Ready”, if the vehicle fails to reach
and release the SELECT button. Press the UP or DOWN
60 mph (100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
button to cycle through the features. Press the SELECT
button to select a feature. Press and hold the SELECT • The time will continue to display until the SELECT
button to reset best time.
button is pressed or the vehicles is brought to a stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to
display until the conditions are met for another event
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
to be recorded.
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run
and prepare the cluster to record a new run.
• This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
Braking Distance
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 25 seconds.
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
met for the event to begin.
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will display when
• The distance and speed measurements display while
conditions are met for the event to begin.
the event is taking place.
• 0.0s will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
(1/4 mile) in less then 25 seconds.
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com• The time will continue to display until the vehicle is
plete stop.
brought to a stop.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instantaneous G-Force
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Vehicle
Info⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
(lateral and longitudinal).
SELECT button and Coolant Temp will be displayed.
Peak G-Force
Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through the
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force following information displays.
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• Coolant Temp
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display. • Oil Temperature
• Pressing and holding the SELECT button for five sec- Displays the actual oil temperature.
onds will clear the peak force values.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Trans Temperature
Uconnect® SETTINGS
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
Messages #
Hard-Keys
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main
Menu.
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
• Engine Hours
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Pressing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing Soft-Keys
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Touch-Screen.
menu back.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings
Press the More soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup.
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
time.
arrow back soft-key.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and release • Display Brightness With Headlights ON
the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the When in this display, you may select the brightness with
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and – setting
soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the • Voice Response Length
+ and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re• Set Language
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
When in this display, you may select one of three
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
to return to the previous menu.
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the • Touchscreen Beep
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
• Units
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
to return to the previous menu.
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
Clock
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster previous menu.
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make • Set Time Hours
your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Set Time Minutes
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
to return to the previous menu.
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust Safety / Assistance
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the folto return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to lowing settings will be available.
close out of the settings screen.
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
• Time Format
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be set to
When in this display, you may select the time format Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of FCW is
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the
Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when
• Show Time In Status Bar
you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. This
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the allows for a more dynamic driving experience. To change
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time the FCW status, touch and release the OFF, Near or Far
Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- • Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mirVehicle”.
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
• Park Assist
position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back • Blind Spot Alert
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for syscan be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
tem function and operating information.
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function and
operating information. To make your selection, touch the
Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey,
Lights
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
will be available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights – If Available
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Steering Directed Lights – If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights softkey,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
to return to the previous menu.
settings will be available.
• Sound Horn With Lock
• Auto Unlock On Exit
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
• Flash Headlight With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the front and headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
selection, touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
touching the handle more than once will only result in the
driver’s door opening. If driver door first is selected, once
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
transmitter).
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the • Passive Entry
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door will
unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive
Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-NGo™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
• Horn With Remote Start
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
soft-key the following settings will be available.
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the folcancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay
lowing settings will be available.
status touch the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or
• Easy Exit Seat
10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Engine Off Options
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches,
radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), DVD video
system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle
speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off,
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
will be available.
• Music Info Cleanup
Audio
• Balance/Fade
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
Fade settings.
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Surround Sound
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To
make your selection, touch the Surround Sound soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key the folarrow back soft-key.
lowing settings will be available.
• Subscription Information
• Paired Devices
Phone/Bluetooth®
This feature shows which phones are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
will be necessary to access the information on the SubscripSiriusXM Setup
tion Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subsettings will be available.
scription Information screen.
• Channel Skip
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to the screen or visit the provider online.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
SRT Performance Features
The Performance Features include the following:
To access the SRT Performance Features, touch the “SRT & • Timers
More” soft-key then touch the “SRT Performance” soft-key.
Press the UP or DOWN soft-key to cycle through the • Engine Values
features. Press the feature soft-key to select that feature.
• Digital Gauge Displays
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Braking Distance
Timers
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h), 1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h), • This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
1/8 mile or 1/4 mile.
• The feature will be “ready” when the vehicle speed is • The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a comat 0 mph (0 km/h).
plete stop.
• Soft-keys allow access to the current, best and last
G-Force
times recorded.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display Gauges 2
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls, When selected, this screen displays the following values:
the peak forces will continue to display.
• Coolant Temperature
Gauges 1
Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of
When selected, this screen displays the following values: the gauge.
• Oil Temperature
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
gauge.
gauge.
• Oil Pressure
• Transmission Temperature
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Shows the actual transmission temperature within the
• Battery Voltage
range of the gauge.
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range
of the gauge.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
Shows the actual oil pressure.
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
Engine
When selected, this screen displays miles per hour (mph),
horsepower (hp), torque (ft/lb), oil pressure (psi) and
gear selector values.
Handling
When selected, this screen displays peak g-force, steering
and yaw angles.
Options
When selected, this screen allows you to choose a standard or customize display for your SRT home page.
Setting The Analog Clock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
plugged into the USB port.
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies delivering substantial increases in component and system effiManual.
ciency levels.
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
supply and drives a 7.5-channel playback architecture.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to
choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source.
The GreenEdge high-efficiency speaker designs ensure
the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in
dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for
maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat
surround sound processing.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position. This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
AUX input; and is activated through the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Surround Sound” under “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a after the current track begins to play.
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
each mode.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
Radio Operation
center button will select the next available CD in the
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next player.
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
precautions:
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
CLIMATE CONTROLS
General Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Hard-Keys
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
The hard-keys located below the Uconnect® screen.
system can be operated through either the Automatic
Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the
Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
4
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-keys
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
4. AUTO Operation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
4
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
7. Rear Climate Button
10. SYNC
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls (if equipped). The indicator will illuminate when
the rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function
again will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
11. Blower Control
Soft-key
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-heys or soft-keys
as follows:
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
Hard-key
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
The blower speed increases as you turn the control center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise. is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)position. Blower control should be left in the “ON” position
to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the
vehicle.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conselected, the blower level may will increase.
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
13. Climate Control OFF Button
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount ON/OFF.
of air is directed through the defrost and side 14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
window demister outlets.
Provides the driver with independent temperature conMix Mode
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
or snowy conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
NOTE:
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
Climate Control Functions
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
A/C (Air Conditioning)
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
MAX A/C
Max A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.Press and release to toggle between Max A/C and
the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when Max
A/C is ON.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Recirculation
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instrument panel.
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Touch-screen.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if conditions
temperature hard or soft control buttons (8, 9, 14, 15).
exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windOnce the desired temperature is displayed, the system
shield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the
will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
system to function automatically.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
NOTE:
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
comfort as quickly as possible.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Operating Tips
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer Operation
Winter Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if
theyenter the plenum, they could plug the water drains.
In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
NOTE:
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Mainperiods, as fogging may occur.
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .376
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .377
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 䡵 SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER – IF EQUIPPED . . . .374 䡵 LAUNCH MODE – IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .388
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .390 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .400
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .400
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . .408
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .420
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .423
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 䡵 TIRE CHAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .424 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .432
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .424
▫ Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .433
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .446
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .441
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .448
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .449
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
(Continued)
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ FOBIK is
in the passenger compartment.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in
the engine starting, press the button again.
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In
pedal.
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN 3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
(EVIC displays “RUN”),
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
OFF position.
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
displays “OFF”).
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
NEUTRAL Position)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
follow these steps.
1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change
the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC displays
“ACC”),
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
(Continued)
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
After Starting
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will Module.
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER – IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the engine OFF.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, the
shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a
location accessible to children), and do not leave
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the key fob can be removed. This system also locks
the shift lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK/OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be cycled to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
⬙AutoStick®⬙ in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or tapping
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (-/+),
will manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 5, 4,
3, 2, 1.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new Gear Ranges
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few NEUTRAL into another gear range.
hundred miles (kilometers).
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the ignition to the OFF position before restarting. Transmisaccelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. sion gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when engine if the key is not cycled to the OFF position first.
shifting between these gears.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
brake.
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
especially important when the engine is cold.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffithe ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the OFF
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
position first.
grade.
PARK
NOTE:
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in
the OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the transmission all the way forward and to the left until it stops
and is fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE
SPORT
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes, touch the
SPORT button (on the Controls screen in the center touch
panel).
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the “AutoStick®” shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
Transmission Limp Home Mode
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the Overdrive Operation
following steps:
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
1. Stop the vehicle.
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
ditions are present:
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
5. Restart the engine.
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK®
Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, and many other situations.
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2— (+) Shift Paddle
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen,
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the transexcept as described below.
mission will operate automatically, shifting between the
five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply tap the • If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE
transmission will automatically shift up when maxiposition, or tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
mum engine speed is reached.
paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick® mode will
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
using (+) to enter AutoStick® mode will retain the current
when maximum engine speed is reached. The transgear. When AutoStick® is active, the current transmission
mission will upshift only when commanded by the
gear is displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information
driver. Engine overspeed protection will be provided
Center (EVIC) portion of the instrument cluster. In
by fuel cut off at or near redline.
AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the • The transmission will automatically downshift as the
shift lever, or the shift paddles, unless an engine lugging or
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
Operation
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle until “D” is
once again displayed in the instrument cluster. You can
shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
• Automatic (Auto) Mode — This is the default position
when vehicle ignition is first turned on. This mode will
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
give a sporty, but comfortable ride. Within this mode, the
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs, including
in many driving situations including cornering, acceleravehicle speed, steering inputs, braking and acceleration.
tion and braking. There are three modes of operation:
• Sport Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in SPORT mode (press the CONTROLS
button and then the SPORT button on the display screen).
The SPORT button can also be found on the SRT Performance Page (press the SRT & MORE button and the SRT
Performance Page button then the SPORT button on the
display screen). This mode will set suspension for maximum performance handling and is intended for spirited
driving.
SPORT MODE
NOTE: The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride.
SPORT Mode
• When SPORT mode is enabled, a shock symbol will light
up in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
• AUTO mode will provide a sporty comfortable ride, LAUNCH MODE – IF EQUIPPED
where as SPORT or TRACK will be a firmer, sportier This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that
suspension with better handling.
is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum vehicle
• Track Mode — This mode includes SPORT suspension acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a form of
and affects transmission shifting in either “Auto” or traction control that manages tire slip while launching the
“Manual” mode. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting vehicle. This feature is intended for use during race events
And Operating” for further information. In TRACK on a closed course where consistent quarter mile and zero to
mode, the transmission has a sportier, more aggressive sixty times are desired. The system is not intended to
shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission will compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity with
the race track. Use of this feature in low traction (cold, wet,
hold gear at redline during manual shifting (console
gravel, etc) conditions may results in excess wheel slip
shifter or paddle shifters).
outside this systems control resulting in an aborted launch.
• When TRACK mode is enabled, a flag symbol will
Preconditions:
light up in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instru- • Launch control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding area.
ment Panel” for further information.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles
of vehicle life.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine 5. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in “Drive”.
and transmission are at operating temperature.
6. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
at approximately 1825 RPM for the quickest launch.
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
may cause damage to vehicle components.
• Messages will appear in the cluster EVIC display to
inform the driver if one or more of the above condiLaunch Control is only available when the following
tions (3 through 6) have not been met.
procedure is followed:
1. Press the “ESC OFF” button to put the vehicle into 7. When conditions 3 through 6 have been met, the cluster
EVIC display will read “Launch Ready Release Brake”.
ESC Partial mode. The “ESC OFF” lamp will illumiRelease the brake and continue to hold wide open
nate in the cluster.
throttle to launch.
2. Press the “ESC OFF” button a second time to put the
vehicle into Launch Control. The “ESC OFF” lamp will 8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
remain lit, and the cluster display will read “Launch
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
Control Enabled”.
62 mph (100 kph), at which point the ESC system
continues in ESC Partial mode. Activating Launch Con3. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
trol again from this state will require pressing the “ESC
4. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
OFF” button once. Repeat steps 3 through 8.
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Launch control will abort before launch completion and DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the
Acceleration
following conditions:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip• The accelerator pedal is released during launch. ESC pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
system continues in ESC Partial.
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer when there is a difference in the surface traction under
moving in a straight line. ESC system continues in ESC the rear (driving) wheels.
Partial.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
to another mode. One press puts the ESC system into
ESC Full-On.
NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500
miles of engine break-in.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
Traction
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent
damage to your vehicle.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
CAUTION! (Continued)
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all PARKING BRAKE
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal NOTE:
a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmisdisengage.
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
Parking Brake
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition driver is not in the vehicle.
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly.
This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and
accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
You also may experience the following when the brake
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased ve- system goes into Anti-Lock:
hicle stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the • The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control • Brake pedal pulsations, and
of available braking forces applied to the rear axle.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may
also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All four
of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic
brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help avoid
skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to
“Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
The ESC system has three available operating modes:
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
ESC On
switch and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn off.
situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
Partial Off
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momenintended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the while the vehicle is in motion.
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
ESC Operating Modes
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle odometer. Press and
release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the
instrument cluster to clear this message. The “ESC OFF”
message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESC Off” switch.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
activate:
HSA Activation Criteria
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Towing With HSA
HSA Off
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
when pulling a trailer.
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “UnderWARNING!
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Ready Alert Braking
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rain Brake Support
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
no driver interaction is required.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC OFF Indicator Light
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acLight” in the instrument cluster will come on celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
position. It should go out with the engine driving to the prevailing road conditions.
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
NOTE:
Synchronizing ESC
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” may illuminate
with the engine running. If this should occur,
turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to
the right. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” should go out. However, if the light remains on,
have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo- • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
B-Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
• For the following example, the combined weight of
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
(392 kg).
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment combine them with other types of tires.
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
Tire Repair
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat,
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm)
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
All Season Tires – If Equipped
your vehicle.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
Snow Tires
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
tire inflation pressures.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proLoading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
checked before using these tire types.
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
replaced.
replacement tires in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
Replacement Tires
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle,
use only chains that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. In addition, only install tire chains on 245/45ZR20
size tires. Contact you local authorized dealership or tire
dealer for these size tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
chain before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
(Continued)
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet
ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
the following diagram.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
mended cold placard pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
the tire.
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
Premium System
condition.
NOTE:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
while adjusting your tire pressure.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the receiver module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
stopping ability.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure • Receiver module,
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
• Four TPM sensors,
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec- Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
• TPM Telltale Light
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the stop flashing or change color back to the original color, and
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound. the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the Service TPMS Warning
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message and a graphic showing the pres- The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
flashing or changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
will also be displayed.
being received.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presnext to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
the TPM sensors.
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
materials that may block radio wave signals.
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnlimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In
addition, the EVIC will display a low pressure mesTelltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure
flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a
value flashing or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed.
different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
OFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
and stop flashing or return to its original color as long
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
limit in any of the four active road tires.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
eration.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of ing licenses:
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
MRXC4W4MA4
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active United States
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.4L Engine
The 6.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containgenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
E-85 perform the following:
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• change the engine oil and oil filter
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
engine controller memory
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged and California reformulated gasoline.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
Materials Added To Fuel
MMT In Gasoline
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is other additives is not needed under normal conditions and
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage not have to add anything to the fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
5
Fuel Filler Door
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
Fuel Funnel
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
Access Cover
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
3. Pull the release cable.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side “B” Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the • Type of Vehicle
“Vehicle Certification Label.” This information should be
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
it is not over the GVWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
rear GAWR.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
WARNING!
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Loading
TRAILER TOWING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
tire pressure.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .452 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . .464
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
䡵 TIREFIT KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .454 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
6
452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
of the instrument panel between the center air outlets.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
may wear down your battery.
engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr).
6
454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Storage
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.
TIREFIT Components
TIREFIT Location
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Power Button
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Selecting Sealant Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting
this mode.
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
Using The Power Button
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
Selecting Air Mode
On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the Power
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position
Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air
Using The Deflation Button
Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
6
456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
TIREFIT kit.
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys- • You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires.
The kit also comes with two needles, located in the
tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
application use. After each use, always replace these
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
components immediately at an authorized dealer.
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
ing sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
intended to seal punctures less than ¼ in (6 mm)
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
discarded.
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6
458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
valve stem.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
nails) from the tire.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIREMode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
FIT kit.
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
On the TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
available. Make sure the engine is running before
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
use. Call for assistance.
tire.
6
460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomlonger flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - mended inflation pressure before continuing.
70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
70 psi (5 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediSealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
ment panel.
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
6
462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(E) After Driving:
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
opening.
position.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
stem.
12 Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar), the tire is too
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
further. Call for assistance.
service center.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT
housing.
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authothe front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
using the TIREFIT service kit.
bottle is locked into place.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
vehicle.
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
6
464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465
Remote Battery Posts
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
WARNING!
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
6
466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
CAUTION!
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467
WARNING!
8. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster you should have the battery and charging system inbattery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then spected at your authorized dealer.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray (located
next to the shifter on the center console).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(in the left side of the storage bin), and push and hold
the override release lever in.
6
470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Shift Lever Override
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Flatbed
Rear
ALL
ALL MODELS
IF Transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- position, not the ACC position.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the vehicle’s key fob is unavailable or the battery is
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to the front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles
(24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground (on a
flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and
the transmission in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .476
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
7
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp . . . . . .520
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps . . .521
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Front Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Power Distribution Center(Fuses)
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. do the following:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
3. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
of a normal bulb check.
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
7
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
happen:
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
not proceed to the I/M station.
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the REPLACEMENT PARTS
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainterecently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacyou may need to do nothing more than drive your turer’s warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, Engine Oil Viscosity
whichever occurs first.
SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic engine oil is preferred for use
in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
Materials Added To Engine Oil
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- your area.
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
Engine Oil Filter
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
tives.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
Engine Oil Filter Selection
WARNING! (Continued)
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
maintenance intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING!
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
Maintenance-Free Battery
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
(Continued)
7
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Access Door
7
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
A/C Air Filter
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the tenance intervals.
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
mance
of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
water
lines
or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
present,
clean
the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
system.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exThe fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damfluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493
Coolant Checks
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
7
494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but Selection Of Coolant
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Mainproper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCAUTION!
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speciCAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive TechIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technolsediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze)
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
MS-12106.
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
cooling system in an emergency, it should be flushed
maintenance intervals.
with OAT coolant and replaced with the specified
OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
7
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery
tank.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
WARNING!
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
7
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporyour engine which contains aluminum components.
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
Points To Remember
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
system components should be inspected periodically. the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when permaintenance intervals.
forming underhood services.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
7
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
any special additives in the transmission.
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmisAutomatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
product and its performance may be impaired by suppletransmission fluid level using special service tools.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmisadversely affect seals.
sion damage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
Fluid And Filter Changes
Fluid Level Check
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle.
maintenance intervals.
The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole. Add
fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
is disassembled for any reason.
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle
Change Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
maintenance intervals.
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
CAUTION!
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial householdCleaning Headlights
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
stone breakage than glass headlights.
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and directly on the mirror.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
cloth.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
buckles do not work properly.
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
rag.
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
CAUTION!
Front Power Distribution Center
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
Front Power Distribution Center
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cartridge
Fuse
—
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
25 Amp
Natural
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
—
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1
9
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
Power Steering #1
10
—
—
Starter
11
—
—
Anti-Lock Brakes
12
—
—
Anti-Lock Brakes
—
—
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
13
14
15
—
—
—
16
—
MiniFuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
All-Wheel Drive
Module – If
Equipped
Security
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
—
Horns
Air Conditioning
Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Transmission
Fuse – Spare
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
22
23
24
28
Cartridge
Fuse
50 Amp
Red
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
—
—
—
—
29
—
18
19
20
21
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
Radiator Fan #2
30
31
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
Power Steering #2
—
Wiper Motor
32
33
34
—
—
—
—
Headlamp Washers
35
—
—
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
36
—
37
—
38
—
Transmission
Shifter
MiniFuse
Description
—
25 Amp
Natural
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake
Module
Engine Controller/
Rad Fan Relays
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Cavity
39
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
Power Steering
Module/AC Clutch
Relay
AWD Module/
Front Axle Disconnect
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
48
—
10 Amp
Red
49
50
51
—
—
—
52
53
—
—
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
7
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Power Distribution Center
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
—
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
—
Front PDC Feed #1
—
—
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
—
Sunroof
—
Exterior Lighting #1
—
Exterior Lighting #2
—
Interior Lighting/
Washer Pump
Power Locks
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
Cavity
10
11
12
15
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
—
16
17
18
40 Amp
Green
—
—
—
19
20
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
Driver Door
—
Passenger Door
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
Cigar Lighters, Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Console Rear
HVAC Blower
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Active Dampening
Module
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Cavity
21
22
23
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
24
—
25
—
26
27
—
—
31
—
32
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
—
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
Radio Screen
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fuse — Spare
Amplifier
Power Seats
HVAC Module/
Cluster
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
33
Cartridge
Fuse
—
34
—
35
—
36
37
—
—
38
—
40
41
42
—
—
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
—
Description
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Module
Steering Column
Module/Clock
Battery Sensor
43
Cartridge
Fuse
—
44
—
45
—
Fuse — Spare
Radio
46
—
47
—
48
—
49
50
—
—
Power Outlet Inside
Arm Rest
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Rear Defrost
Cavity
MiniFuse
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
Description
Rear Heated Seats/
Steering Wheel
Park Assist/Blind
Spot/Camera
Cluster/Rearview
Mirror/Compass
Adaptive Cruise
Control
Adaptive Front
Lighting
Active Suspension
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Cavity
51
Cartridge
Fuse
—
52
—
53
—
54
55
56
57
58
—
—
—
—
—
59
60
—
—
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
—
—
Description
Front Heated Seats
Heated Cupholders/
Rear Heated Seat
Switches
HVAC Module/In Car
Temperature Sensor
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Airbag Module
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Cavity
61
62
63
64
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
65
—
66
67
—
—
68
—
69
70
—
—
MiniFuse
—
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
—
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
—
—
Description
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Rear Windows
Airbag Module
Fuse — Spare
Run Sense
Illumination/Rear
Sunshade
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
W5W
Rear Courtesy/Reading
Lamps
Rear Compartment
562
(Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console
578
Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If
194
Equipped
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at
Pocket/Cupholder
Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam
(Bi-Halogen Headlamp)
Low Beam/High Beam
(Bi-Xenon Headlamp)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If
Equipped
Bulb Number
HIR2LL
D3S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
PSY24WSV
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
H11
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Rear Tail/Stop/
Turn Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Backup Lamp
Center High Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Rear Fog Lamp – If
Equipped
Bulb Number
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
W21W
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
W5W
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the trunk.
5. Pull the tail lamp assembly away from the vehicle
enough to access the electrical connector.
6. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector.
8. Continue removing lamp from vehicle in order to
access the bulb(s).
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
2. Remove the trunk trim by removing the grocery hook
(using a T-20 torque driver or similar tool), remove the 10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
fastener, and pull back the weather strip.
3. Pull back the trunk liner to gain access to the tail lamp 11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
wing nuts.
4. Remove the three wing nuts from the back of the tail
lamp assembly.
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk trim.
13. Close the trunk.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
19 Gallons
Metric
72 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
15.2 Quarts
14.4 Liters
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, We recommend you use full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or SM/CF.
We recommend you use full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you ONLY use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 brake fluid. If DOT 3 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid + 4, or MOPAR®
ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W–90
(API GL-5) in addition to MOPAR® Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear
Additive).
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . .530 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
528 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dismanual must be done at the times or mileages specified played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main- Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating indicator message will illuminate. This means that serconditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
S driving. Inspection and service should also be done serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
C anytime a malfunction is suspected.
(805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
H
E The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
D time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 529 M
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance E
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- D
U
hicle” for further information.
L
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if E
S
At Each Stop For Fuel
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
530 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
damage.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
CAUTION!
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
S
needed.
C
H
E • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
D
U
L
E
S
8
At Each Oil Change
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 531 M
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
or 12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 532 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 533 M
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535 M
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 537 M
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.*
* Spark plug change interval is mileage based only, Monthly intervals do not apply.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 539 M
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (250 000 km)
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 541 M
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
N
T 138 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 543 M
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 150,000 miles (250 000 km) or
120 months whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .548
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .549
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .552
9
546 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 547
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
9
548 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247–9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 549
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
550 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 551
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
manufacturer.
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
9
552 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
individual problems between you, your authorized To order the following manuals, you may use either the
dealer, and the manufacturer.
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, MasTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- for an order form.
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other informanuals (no P.O. Boxes).
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
Service Manuals
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 553
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Call toll free at:
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
Owner’s Manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
Traction Grades
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 555
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
558 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .223
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .483
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .18
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .360
INDEX 559
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .94
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
10
560 INDEX
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .304
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.353
.348
.287
.372
.352
.425
.324
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.349
.349
.321
.287
.550
.496
.493
.495
.523
.493
.497
INDEX 561
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .321
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.494
.497
.498
.496
.496
.494
.504
.223
.284
.547
10
562 INDEX
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .510
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .220
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .257
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Emergency, In Case of
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .477
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
INDEX 563
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .524
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
10
564 INDEX
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.440
.442
.440
.321
.441
.305
.440
.305
.316
.442
.441
.440
.440
.321
.524
.523
.321
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
INDEX 565
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Hazard
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .204
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .204
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
10
566 INDEX
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .408
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
INDEX 567
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .209
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .304
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .303
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .301
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .304 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
10
568 INDEX
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Mode
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .304 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
INDEX 569
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . .
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . .
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Interval . . . . . . . . .
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added to . . . . . . .
Recommendation . . . . . . . .
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . .
Onboard Diagnostic System . . .
Operating Precautions . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.440
.302
.302
.302
.480
.523
.320
.480
.480
.482
.482
.482
.482
.481
.482
.481
.483
.476
.476
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .416
Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
10
570 INDEX
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .279
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.423
.496
.352
.350
.212
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .350
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
INDEX 571
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .52
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
10
572 INDEX
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .304
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
INDEX 573
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .350
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .57
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .360
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .416
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
10
574 INDEX
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.425
.420
.423
.421
.428
.416
.433
.303
.553
.423
.429
.432
.410
.411
.424
.427
.428
.410
.196
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .449
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .21
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
INDEX 575
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .301
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Washer
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .349
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
10
576 INDEX
Windshield Washers . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades .
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.209
.490
.489
.209
.489
.210
.212
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler
Group LLC
Chrysler
Group LLC
13C482-126-AD
13ZD-126-AA
OWNER’S MANUAL
Printed
in U.S.A.
Printed in
U.S.A.
3rd Edition
First
Edition
1135554cv1
Viper
13ZD-126-AA
Chrysler 1" gutter 07/11/2012 15:40:46
2013 Viper
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
13ZD-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Viper
COVER INCOVER IN
2013 Viper
2013
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement